blob: cff3a26a9dae0444d90b808fecdae1e1e387dd2d [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050087struct device;
88
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040089/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020090 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
91 *
92 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010093 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020094 */
95enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020096 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010097 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020098};
99
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200100#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
101
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200102/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800103 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
108 */
109enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
110 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
111 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
113 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
114};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200115#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800116
117/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400118 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
119 *
120 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100121 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400122 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400123 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200124 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
125 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400126 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100127 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300128 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200129 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400130 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700131struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200132 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100133 u16 cw_min;
134 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300136 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200137 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700138};
139
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700140struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
141 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
143 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
144 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
145};
146
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100147/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200148 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
153 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200155 */
156enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200162};
163
164/**
165 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
166 *
167 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
168 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
169 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100170 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200171 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200183 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200184
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
186
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100187 bool radar_enabled;
188
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100189 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190};
191
192/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
194 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
195 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
196 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
197 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
198 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
199 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
200 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
201 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
202 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
203 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
204 * for changes/removal.)
205 */
206enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
207 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
208 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
209};
210
211/**
212 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
213 *
214 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
215 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
216 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
217 * done.
218 *
219 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
220 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
221 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
222 */
223struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
227};
228
229/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100230 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
231 *
232 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
233 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
234 *
235 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
236 * also implies a change in the AID.
237 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
238 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300239 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700240 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200241 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200242 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200243 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
244 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
245 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
246 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
247 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
248 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200249 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200250 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300251 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200252 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
253 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200254 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200255 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200256 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300257 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200258 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100259 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
260 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300261 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
262 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100263 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
264 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
265 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100266 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100267 */
268enum ieee80211_bss_change {
269 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
270 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
271 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200273 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
277 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
278 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200279 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200280 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300281 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200282 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200283 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300284 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200285 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300286 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200287 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100288 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300289 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100290 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100291 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200292
293 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100294};
295
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300296/*
297 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
298 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
299 * filtering will be disabled.
300 */
301#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
302
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100303/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700304 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
305 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
306 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
307 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
308 */
309enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
310 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
311 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
312};
313
314/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100315 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
316 *
317 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
318 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
319 *
320 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200321 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
322 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530323 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100324 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
325 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200326 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
327 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
328 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
329 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
330 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
331 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100332 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200333 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300334 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200335 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100336 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
337 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
338 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
339 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
340 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200341 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
342 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100343 * (see @sync_tsf)
344 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
345 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700346 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800347 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200348 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
349 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
350 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300351 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100352 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200353 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
354 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100355 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
356 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100357 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200358 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200359 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
360 * implies disabled
361 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300362 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
363 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
364 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
365 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100366 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
367 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
368 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200369 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200370 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
371 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
372 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300373 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
374 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200375 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300376 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
377 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200378 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100379 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100380 */
381struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200382 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100383 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200384 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530385 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100386 u16 aid;
387 /* erp related data */
388 bool use_cts_prot;
389 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300390 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200391 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800392 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700393 u16 beacon_int;
394 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200395 u64 sync_tsf;
396 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100397 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100398 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300399 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100400 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200401 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200402 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
403 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100404 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300405 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100406 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200407 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200408 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300409 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300410 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
411 size_t ssid_len;
412 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200413 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100414 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100415};
416
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800417/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200418 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800419 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700420 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800421 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100422 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200423 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
424 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
425 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
426 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
427 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
428 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
429 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
430 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
431 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
432 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
433 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200434 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200435 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
436 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200437 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200438 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
439 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200440 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200441 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200442 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
443 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
444 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
445 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
446 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
447 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
448 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
449 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200450 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
451 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
452 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300453 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
454 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200455 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
456 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
457 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600458 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
459 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
460 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100461 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
462 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
463 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200464 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
465 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200466 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
467 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100468 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
469 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
470 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200471 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
472 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
473 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
474 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100475 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
476 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
477 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100478 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
479 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
480 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200481 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
482 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
483 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400484 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200485 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
486 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100487 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
488 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
489 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
490 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200491 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
492 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
493 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530494 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
495 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
496 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200497 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
498 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
499 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200500 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
501 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530502 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
503 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
504 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200505 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
506 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
507 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200508 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
509 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200510 *
511 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
512 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800513 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200514enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200515 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200516 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
517 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
518 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
519 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
520 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
521 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
522 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
523 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
524 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
525 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
526 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
527 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600528 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100529 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200530 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200531 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200533 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100534 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100535 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200536 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400537 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200538 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100539 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200540 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530541 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200542 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530543 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200544 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200545 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200546};
547
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200548#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
549
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200550/**
551 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
552 *
553 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
554 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
555 *
556 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
557 */
558enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
559 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
560};
561
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200562/*
563 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
564 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
565 */
566#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
567 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
568 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
569 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
570 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100571 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200572 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200573 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200574
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530575/**
576 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
577 * Rate Control algorithm.
578 *
579 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
580 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
581 *
582 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
583 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
584 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
585 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
586 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100587 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
588 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530589 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
590 * Greenfield mode.
591 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100592 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
593 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
594 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530595 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
596 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
597 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
598 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
599 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200600enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
601 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
602 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
603 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
604
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100605 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200606 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
607 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
608 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
609 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
610 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100611 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
612 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
613 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800614};
615
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200616
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200617/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
618#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200619
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200620/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
621#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
622
623/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200624#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200625
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200626/* maximum number of rate table entries */
627#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
628
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200629/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200630 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200631 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200632 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
633 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200634 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200635 *
636 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
637 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
638 *
639 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
640 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200641 *
642 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
643 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
644 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
645 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
646 * information
647 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
648 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
649 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
650 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
651 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
652 * information should then contain
653 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
654 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
655 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200656 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200657struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
658 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100659 u16 count:5,
660 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000661} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200662
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100663#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
664
665static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
666 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
667{
668 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200669 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
670 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100671}
672
673static inline u8
674ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
675{
676 return rate->idx & 0xF;
677}
678
679static inline u8
680ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
681{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200682 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100683}
684
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200685/**
686 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200687 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200688 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
689 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
690 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
691 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
692 *
693 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200694 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200695 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100696 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700697 * @control: union for control data
698 * @status: union for status data
699 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100700 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700701 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100702 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700703 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200704 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200705 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200706struct ieee80211_tx_info {
707 /* common information */
708 u32 flags;
709 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200710
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200711 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100712
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100713 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100714
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200715 union {
716 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200717 union {
718 /* rate control */
719 struct {
720 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
721 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
722 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200723 u8 use_rts:1;
724 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200725 u8 short_preamble:1;
726 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200727 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200728 };
729 /* only needed before rate control */
730 unsigned long jiffies;
731 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200732 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200733 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
734 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200735 u32 flags;
736 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200737 } control;
738 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200739 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200740 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200741 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100742 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200743 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300744 u16 tx_time;
745 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200746 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200747 struct {
748 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
749 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200750 u8 pad[4];
751
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200752 void *rate_driver_data[
753 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
754 };
755 void *driver_data[
756 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200757 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700758};
759
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300760/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200761 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
762 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200763 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
764 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
765 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200766 *
767 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
768 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
769 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
770 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
771 */
772struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
773 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
774 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
775 const u8 *common_ies;
776 size_t common_ie_len;
777};
778
779
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200780static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
781{
782 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
783}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400784
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200785static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
786{
787 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
788}
789
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200790/**
791 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
792 *
793 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
794 *
795 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
796 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
797 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
798 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
799 *
800 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
801 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
802 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
803 */
804static inline void
805ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
806{
807 int i;
808
809 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
810 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
811 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
812 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
813 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
814 /* clear the rate counts */
815 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
816 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
817
818 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200819 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200820 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
821 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
822 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
823}
824
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400825
826/**
827 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
828 *
829 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
830 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
831 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
832 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400833 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
834 * verification has been done by the hardware.
835 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
836 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
837 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400838 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
839 * the frame.
840 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
841 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800842 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100843 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
844 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
845 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800846 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
847 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
848 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200849 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200850 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100851 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200852 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
853 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100854 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
855 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200856 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
857 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
858 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200859 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
860 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
861 * each A-MPDU
862 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
863 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
864 * monitoring purposes only
865 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
866 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
867 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
868 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
869 * on this subframe
870 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
871 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200872 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200873 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200874 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
875 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200876 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
877 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
878 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
879 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
880 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
881 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
882 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
883 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
884 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100885 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
886 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
887 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400888 */
889enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200890 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
891 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
892 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
893 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
894 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
895 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800896 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200897 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
898 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
899 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
900 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
901 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
902 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
903 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
904 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
905 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
906 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
907 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
908 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
909 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800910 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100911 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200912 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200913 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200914 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
915 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200916 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100917 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400918};
919
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200920#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
921
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400922/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200923 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
924 *
925 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
926 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
927 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
928 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
929 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200930 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200931 */
932enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
933 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
934 RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(1),
935 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200936 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(3),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200937};
938
939/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400940 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
941 *
942 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
943 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200944 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200945 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900946 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
947 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200948 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
949 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100950 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400951 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200952 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
953 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
954 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200955 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
956 * values were filled.
957 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
958 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400959 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200960 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100961 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
962 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400963 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200964 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200965 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200966 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
967 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
968 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400969 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700970struct ieee80211_rx_status {
971 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200972 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200973 u32 ampdu_reference;
974 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200975 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200976 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200977 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100978 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200979 u8 rx_flags;
980 u8 band;
981 u8 antenna;
982 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200983 u8 chains;
984 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200985 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700986};
987
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400988/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100989 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
990 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
991 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
992 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
993 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
994 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
995 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
996 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
997 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
998 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
999 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1000 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1001 * @data field.
1002 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1003 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1004 * length
1005 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1006 *
1007 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1008 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1009 * data.
1010 */
1011struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1012 u32 present;
1013 u8 align;
1014 u8 oui[3];
1015 u8 subns;
1016 u8 pad;
1017 u16 len;
1018 u8 data[];
1019} __packed;
1020
1021/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001022 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1023 *
1024 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1025 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001026 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1027 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1028 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001029 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1030 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1031 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1032 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1033 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1034 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1035 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001036 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1037 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1038 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1039 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1040 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001041 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1042 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001043 */
1044enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001045 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001046 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001047 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001048 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001049};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001050
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001051
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001052/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001053 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1054 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001055 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001056 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001057 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001058 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001059 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001060 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001061 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001062 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001063 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1064 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001065 */
1066enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001067 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001068 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001069 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001070 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001071 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1072 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1073 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001074 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001075};
1076
1077/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001078 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1079 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001080 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1081 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1082 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1083 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1084 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001085 */
1086enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1087 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1088 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1089 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1090 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1091
1092 /* keep last */
1093 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1094};
1095
1096/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001097 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1098 *
1099 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1100 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001101 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1102 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001103 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001104 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001105 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1106 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1107 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1108 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001109 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1110 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1111 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001112 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1113 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1114 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1115 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001116 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1117 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001118 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001119 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001120 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001121 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001122 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001123 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1124 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001125 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001126 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1127 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001128 *
1129 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1130 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001131 * configured for an HT channel.
1132 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1133 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001134 */
1135struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001136 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001137 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001138 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001139
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001140 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001141 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001142
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001143 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1144
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001145 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001146 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001147 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001148};
1149
1150/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001151 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1152 *
1153 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1154 * operation.
1155 *
1156 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1157 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1158 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1159 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001160 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1161 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001162 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1163 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001164 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001165 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1166 */
1167struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1168 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001169 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001170 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001171 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001172 u8 count;
1173};
1174
1175/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001176 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1177 *
1178 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1179 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001180 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1181 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1182 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1183 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001184 */
1185enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1186 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001187 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001188};
1189
1190/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001191 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1192 *
1193 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1194 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1195 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001196 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001197 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1198 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001199 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001200 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1201 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001202 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1203 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1204 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001205 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1206 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1207 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1208 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001209 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1210 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001211 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1212 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1213 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1214 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1215 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001216 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001217 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001218 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001219 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1220 * sizeof(void *).
1221 */
1222struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001223 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001224 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001225 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001226 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001227 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001228
1229 u8 cab_queue;
1230 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1231
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001232 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1233
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001234 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001235
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001236#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1237 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1238#endif
1239
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001240 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001241 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001242};
1243
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001244static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1245{
1246#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001247 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001248#endif
1249 return false;
1250}
1251
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001252/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001253 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1254 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1255 *
1256 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1257 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1258 *
1259 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1260 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1261 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1262 */
1263struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1264
1265/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001266 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1267 *
1268 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1269 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1270 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001271 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1272 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivca34e3b2014-07-29 15:38:53 +03001273 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1274 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001275 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1276 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1277 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001278 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1279 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001280 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001281 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1282 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001283 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001284 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001285 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivca34e3b2014-07-29 15:38:53 +03001286 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1287 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1288 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001289 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1290 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1291 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1292 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1293 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1294 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1295 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001296 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1297 * driver for a CCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1298 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001299 */
1300enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001301 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1302 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1303 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1304 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1305 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1306 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1307 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001308};
1309
1310/**
1311 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1312 *
1313 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1314 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1315 *
1316 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1317 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001318 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001319 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001320 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1321 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1322 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001323 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1324 * data block:
1325 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1326 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1327 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001328 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1329 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001330 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001331struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001332 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001333 u8 icv_len;
1334 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001335 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001336 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001337 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001338 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001339 u8 key[0];
1340};
1341
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001342/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001343 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1344 *
1345 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1346 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1347 *
1348 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1349 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1350 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1351 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1352 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1353 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1354 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1355 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1356 * key_idx value calculation:
1357 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1358 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1359 */
1360struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1361 u32 cipher;
1362 u16 iftype;
1363 u8 hdr_len;
1364 u8 pn_len;
1365 u8 pn_off;
1366 u8 key_idx_off;
1367 u8 key_idx_mask;
1368 u8 key_idx_shift;
1369 u8 mic_len;
1370};
1371
1372/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001373 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1374 *
1375 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1376 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1377 *
1378 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1379 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1380 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001381enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001382 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001383};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001384
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001385/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001386 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1387 *
1388 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1389 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1390 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1391 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1392 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1393 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1394 */
1395enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1396 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1397 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1398 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1399 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1400 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1401 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1402};
1403
1404/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001405 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1406 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1407 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1408 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1409 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1410 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1411 *
1412 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1413 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1414 */
1415enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1416 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1417 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1418 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1419 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1420};
1421
1422/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001423 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1424 *
1425 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001426 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001427 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1428 */
1429struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1430 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1431 struct {
1432 s8 idx;
1433 u8 count;
1434 u8 count_cts;
1435 u8 count_rts;
1436 u16 flags;
1437 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1438};
1439
1440/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001441 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1442 *
1443 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1444 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1445 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1446 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1447 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001448 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001449 *
1450 * @addr: MAC address
1451 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001452 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001453 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1454 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berga74a8c82014-07-22 14:50:47 +02001455 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001456 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1457 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001458 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1459 * if wme is supported.
1460 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001461 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001462 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1463 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1464 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1465 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001466 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001467 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001468 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001469 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1470 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001471 */
1472struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001473 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001474 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1475 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001476 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001477 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001478 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001479 u8 uapsd_queues;
1480 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001481 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001482 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001483 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001484 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001485 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001486 bool tdls_initiator;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001487
1488 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001489 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001490};
1491
1492/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001493 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1494 *
1495 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301496 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001497 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001498 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1499 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1500 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001501enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001502 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1503};
1504
1505/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001506 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1507 *
1508 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1509 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1510 */
1511struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1512 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1513};
1514
1515/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001516 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1517 *
1518 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1519 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1520 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1521 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1522 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1523 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001524 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1525 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1526 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1527 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1528 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1529 * algorithm.
1530 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1531 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1532 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1533 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1534 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1535 * CCK frames.
1536 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001537 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1538 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1539 * the FCS at the end.
1540 *
1541 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1542 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1543 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1544 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1545 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1546 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001547 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001548 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001549 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1550 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1551 *
1552 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1553 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1554 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001555 *
1556 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1557 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1558 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1559 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1560 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001561 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1562 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1563 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1564 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1565 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001566 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1567 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1568 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301569 *
1570 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1571 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001572 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001573 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1574 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1575 *
1576 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1577 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1578 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1579 *
1580 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1581 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001582 *
1583 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1584 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001585 *
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001586 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1587 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1588 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1589 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301590 *
1591 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1592 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1593 * the stack.
1594 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001595 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001596 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1597 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001598 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001599 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1600 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1601 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001602 *
1603 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1604 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1605 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1606 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1607 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1608 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001609 *
1610 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1611 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1612 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1613 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1614 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1615 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001616 *
1617 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1618 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1619 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001620 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001621 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1622 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1623 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001624 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001625 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1626 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1627 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1628 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001629 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1630 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1631 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1632 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001633 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001634 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1635 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1636 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001637 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1638 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1639 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001640 *
1641 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1642 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001643 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001644 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1645 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1646 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1647 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001648 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1649 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1650 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1651 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001652 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001653 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1654 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1655 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001656 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1657 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001658 */
1659enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001660 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001661 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1662 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001663 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1664 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001665 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001666 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001667 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001668 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1669 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1670 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1671 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1672 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1673 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001674 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001675 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
1676 /* free slot */
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001677 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301678 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001679 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001680 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001681 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001682 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001683 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001684 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001685 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001686 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001687 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001688 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001689 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001690 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001691};
1692
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001693/**
1694 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001695 *
1696 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1697 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1698 *
1699 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1700 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1701 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001702 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1703 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001704 *
1705 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1706 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001707 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1708 * along with this structure.
1709 *
1710 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1711 *
1712 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1713 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1714 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001715 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1716 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001717 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001718 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001719 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001720 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001721 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001722 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001723 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001724 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001725 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1726 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1727 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001728 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1729 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1730 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001731 *
1732 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1733 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001734 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1735 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001736 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1737 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001738 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001739 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1740 * can handle.
1741 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1742 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001743 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001744 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001745 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1746 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1747 * aggregation.
1748 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1749 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1750 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001751 *
1752 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1753 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1754 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001755 *
1756 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1757 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001758 *
1759 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1760 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1761 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1762 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001763 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001764 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1765 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1766 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1767 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001768 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1769 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1770 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001771 *
1772 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1773 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1774 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1775 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1776 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1777 * neither enabled.
1778 *
1779 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1780 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1781 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001782 *
1783 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1784 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1785 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001786 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001787struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001788 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001789 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001790 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001791 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001792 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001793 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001794 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001795 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001796 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001797 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001798 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001799 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001800 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001801 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001802 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001803 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001804 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001805 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001806 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001807 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001808 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001809 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001810 u8 uapsd_queues;
1811 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001812 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1813 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001814};
1815
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001816/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001817 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
1818 *
1819 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
1820 * @req: cfg80211 request.
1821 */
1822struct ieee80211_scan_request {
1823 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
1824
1825 /* Keep last */
1826 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
1827};
1828
1829/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02001830 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
1831 *
1832 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
1833 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
1834 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
1835 * @status: channel-switch response status
1836 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
1837 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1838 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1839 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
1840 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
1841 */
1842struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
1843 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1844 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
1845 u8 action_code;
1846 u32 status;
1847 u32 timestamp;
1848 u16 switch_time;
1849 u16 switch_timeout;
1850 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
1851 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
1852};
1853
1854/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001855 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1856 *
1857 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1858 *
1859 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1860 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1861 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1862 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1863 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001864 *
1865 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001866 */
1867struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1868
1869/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001870 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1871 *
1872 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1873 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1874 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001875static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1876{
1877 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1878}
1879
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001880/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001881 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001882 *
1883 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1884 * @addr: the address to set
1885 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001886static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1887{
1888 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1889}
1890
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001891static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1892ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001893 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001894{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001895 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001896 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001897 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001898}
1899
1900static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1901ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001902 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001903{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001904 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001905 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001906 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001907}
1908
1909static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1910ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001911 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001912{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001913 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001914 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001915 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001916}
1917
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001918/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001919 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1920 * @hw: the hardware
1921 * @skb: the skb
1922 *
1923 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1924 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1925 */
1926void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1927
1928/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001929 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001930 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001931 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1932 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1933 *
1934 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1935 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001936 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1937 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1938 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001939 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1940 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1941 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001942 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1943 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1944 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1945 *
1946 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1947 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1948 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1949 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1950 *
1951 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1952 *
1953 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1954 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1955 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1956 * based on the receive flags.
1957 *
1958 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1959 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1960 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1961 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001962 *
1963 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1964 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1965 * handler.
1966 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001967 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001968 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1969 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001970 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001971 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001972 *
1973 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1974 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1975 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001976 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001977
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001978/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001979 * DOC: Powersave support
1980 *
1981 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1982 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001983 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1984 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1985 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1986 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1987 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1988 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1989 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1990 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001991 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001992 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1993 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1994 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001995 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1996 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001997 *
1998 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1999 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2000 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002001 *
2002 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2003 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2004 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2005 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002006 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2007 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002008 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002009 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002010 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2011 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2012 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2013 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2014 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2015 * periods.
2016 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002017 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002018 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2019 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2020 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2021 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2022 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2023 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2024 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2025 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2026 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2027 *
2028 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2029 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002030 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002031 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2032 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2033 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2034 *
2035 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2036 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002037 */
2038
2039/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002040 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2041 *
2042 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002043 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002044 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2045 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2046 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2047 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2048 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2049 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002050 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2051 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002052 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2053 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2054 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2055 *
2056 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2057 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2058 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2059 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2060 *
2061 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2062 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2063 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2064 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2065 * - a list of information element IDs
2066 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2067 *
2068 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2069 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2070 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2071 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2072 * vendor information elements.
2073 *
2074 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2075 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2076 *
2077 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2078 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2079 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2080 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2081 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2082 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2083 *
2084 *
2085 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2086 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2087 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2088 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2089 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2090 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2091 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2092 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2093 *
2094 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2095 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2096 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002097 */
2098
2099/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002100 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2101 *
2102 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2103 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2104 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2105 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2106 *
2107 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2108 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2109 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2110 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2111 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2112 * hardware flags.
2113 *
2114 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2115 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2116 * turned off otherwise.
2117 *
2118 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2119 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2120 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2121 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2122 */
2123
2124/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002125 * DOC: Frame filtering
2126 *
2127 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2128 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2129 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2130 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2131 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2132 *
2133 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2134 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2135 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2136 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002137 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2138 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2139 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2140 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2141 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2142 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2143 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002144 *
2145 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2146 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2147 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2148 * or dropped.
2149 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002150 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2151 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2152 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2153 * the flag, but not clear it.
2154 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2155 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2156 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2157 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2158 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2159 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2160 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2161 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002162 */
2163
2164/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002165 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2166 *
2167 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2168 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2169 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2170 *
2171 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2172 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2173 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2174 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2175 * the driver code.
2176 *
2177 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2178 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2179 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2180 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2181 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2182 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2183 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2184 *
2185 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2186 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2187 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2188 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2189 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2190 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2191 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2192 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2193 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2194 * @sta_notify callback.
2195 *
2196 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2197 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2198 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2199 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2200 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2201 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2202 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002203 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002204 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2205 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2206 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2207 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2208 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2209 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2210 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002211 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2212 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2213 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002214 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2215 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2216 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2217 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2218 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2219 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2220 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2221 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2222 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2223 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2224 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2225 *
2226 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2227 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2228 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2229 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2230 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2231 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2232 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2233 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2234 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2235 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002236 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002237 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2238 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2239 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2240 *
2241 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2242 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2243 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2244 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2245 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002246 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002247 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2248 *
2249 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2250 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2251 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2252 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002253 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002254 *
2255 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2256 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2257 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2258 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002259 */
2260
2261/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002262 * DOC: HW queue control
2263 *
2264 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2265 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2266 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2267 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2268 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2269 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2270 *
2271 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2272 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2273 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2274 *
2275 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2276 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2277 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2278 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2279 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2280 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2281 * the hardware queue.
2282 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2283 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2284 *
2285 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2286 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2287 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2288 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2289 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2290 *
2291 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2292 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2293 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2294 * off-channel queue: 9
2295 *
2296 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2297 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2298 *
2299 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2300 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2301 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2302 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2303 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2304 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2305 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2306 *
2307 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2308 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2309 *
2310 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2311 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2312 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2313 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2314 */
2315
2316/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002317 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2318 *
2319 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2320 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2321 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2322 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2323 *
2324 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2325 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2326 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2327 *
2328 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2329 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2330 * multicast address.
2331 *
2332 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2333 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2334 *
2335 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2336 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2337 *
2338 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2339 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2340 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2341 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2342 * honour this flag if possible.
2343 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002344 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002345 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002346 *
2347 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002348 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002349 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2350 * those addressed to this station.
2351 *
2352 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002353 */
2354enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2355 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2356 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2357 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2358 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2359 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2360 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2361 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002362 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002363 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002364};
2365
2366/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002367 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2368 *
2369 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2370 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002371 *
2372 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2373 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002374 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002375 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2376 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002377 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2378 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2379 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002380 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002381 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2382 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2383 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2384 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2385 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2386 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2387 * session is gone and removes the station.
2388 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2389 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2390 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2391 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002392 */
2393enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2394 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2395 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002396 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002397 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2398 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2399 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002400 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002401};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002402
2403/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002404 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2405 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002406 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2407 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002408 */
2409enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2410 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002411 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002412};
2413
2414/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002415 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2416 *
2417 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002418 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2419 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2420 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002421 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002422 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2423 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2424 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002425 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2426 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002427 */
2428enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2429 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2430 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002431 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002432 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002433};
2434
2435/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002436 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2437 *
2438 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2439 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2440 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2441 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2442 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2443 *
2444 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2445 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2446 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2447 */
2448enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2449 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2450 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2451};
2452
2453/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002454 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2455 *
2456 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2457 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2458 *
2459 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2460 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2461 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2462 * of wowlan configuration)
2463 */
2464enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2465 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2466 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2467};
2468
2469/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002470 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2471 *
2472 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2473 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2474 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2475 *
2476 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2477 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2478 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002479 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002480 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002481 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002482 *
2483 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2484 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2485 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2486 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2487 * or zero.
2488 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2489 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2490 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002491 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002492 *
2493 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2494 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2495 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2496 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002497 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2498 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002499 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002500 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002501 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2502 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2503 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2504 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2505 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002506 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2507 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2508 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2509 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002510 *
2511 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2512 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2513 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2514 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2515 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2516 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002517 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2518 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2519 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2520 * in suspend().
2521 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002522 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002523 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002524 * and @stop must be implemented.
2525 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2526 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2527 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2528 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2529 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002530 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002531 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002532 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2533 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2534 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2535 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2536 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2537 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002538 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2539 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2540 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2541 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2542 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2543 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2544 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002545 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002546 *
2547 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2548 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002549 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002550 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002551 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002552 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2553 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2554 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2555 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2556 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002557 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2558 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002559 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002560 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2561 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2562 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2563 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002564 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2565 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002566 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002567 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002568 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002569 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002570 *
2571 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002572 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2573 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002574 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002575 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002576 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002577 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002578 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2579 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2580 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002581 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002582 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002583 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2584 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2585 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2586 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2587 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2588 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002589 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2590 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2591 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2592 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002593 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002594 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002595 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2596 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002597 * that power save is disabled.
2598 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2599 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2600 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2601 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2602 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2603 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2604 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002605 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002606 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002607 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2608 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2609 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2610 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2611 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2612 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2613 * The callback can sleep.
2614 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002615 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2616 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2617 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2618 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2619 *
2620 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002621 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002622 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002623 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2624 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002625 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2626 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2627 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002628 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002629 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2630 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2631 * this notification.
2632 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002633 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002634 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2635 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002636 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002637 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002638 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2639 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2640 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002641 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002642 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002643 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2644 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2645 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2646 * The callback can sleep.
2647 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002648 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002649 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002650 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002651 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2652 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2653 *
2654 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002655 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2656 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2657 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2658 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2659 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002660 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302661 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2662 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2663 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2664 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2665 *
2666 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2667 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2668 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002669 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002670 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2671 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2672 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002673 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002674 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2675 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2676 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2677 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002678 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2679 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2680 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2681 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2682 * The callback can sleep.
2683 *
2684 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2685 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2686 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2687 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2688 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002689 * The callback can sleep.
2690 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002691 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2692 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2693 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2694 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2695 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2696 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2697 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002698 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2699 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2700 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002701 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002702 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002703 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002704 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002705 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002706 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002707 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002708 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002709 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002710 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002711 *
2712 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002713 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002714 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002715 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002716 *
2717 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2718 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2719 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2720 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002721 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002722 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002723 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2724 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2725 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002726 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002727 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002728 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002729 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2730 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2731 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2732 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002733 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002734 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002735 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2736 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002737 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2738 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2739 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2740 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2741 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2742 * - TX: 1.....7
2743 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2744 * - TX: 8..1...
2745 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2746 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2747 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2748 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2749 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002750 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002751 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002752 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002753 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2754 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002755 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2756 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2757 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002758 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002759 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002760 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2761 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002762 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2763 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2764 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002765 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002766 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2767 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002768 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002769 *
2770 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002771 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2772 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2773 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2774 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002775 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002776 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002777 *
2778 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2779 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2780 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2781 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002782 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002783 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2784 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2785 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2786 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2787 *
2788 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002789 *
2790 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2791 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2792 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2793 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2794 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2795 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002796 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002797 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2798 * must be accepted in this case.
2799 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002800 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2801 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002802 *
2803 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2804 *
2805 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302806 *
2807 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2808 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302809 *
2810 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2811 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2812 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002813 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2814 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002815 *
2816 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2817 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2818 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2819 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002820 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002821 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2822 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2823 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2824 * more-data bit must always be set.
2825 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2826 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002827 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2828 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2829 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2830 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2831 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2832 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002833 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2834 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2835 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002836 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2837 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002838 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002839 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002840 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002841 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2842 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2843 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002844 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002845 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2846 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2847 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2848 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002849 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002850 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002851 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2852 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2853 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002854 *
2855 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2856 *
2857 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2858 *
2859 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2860 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2861 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002862 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2863 * and can sleep.
2864 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002865 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2866 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2867 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2868 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2869 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2870 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2871 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2872 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2873 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2874 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2875 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2876 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002877 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03002878 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
2879 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
2880 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
2881 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
2882 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
2883 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
2884 * 2 * (DTIM period).
2885 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
2886 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002887 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2888 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2889 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2890 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2891 * channel context with different settings
2892 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2893 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2894 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2895 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03002896 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
2897 * another, as specified in the list of
2898 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
2899 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
2900 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002901 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2902 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2903 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2904 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2905 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2906 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2907 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002908 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002909 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
2910 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
2911 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
2912 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
2913 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002914 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002915 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2916 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2917 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002918 *
2919 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2920 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2921 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002922 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002923 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2924 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002925 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002926 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002927 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2928 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03002929 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2930 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
2931 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
2932 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03002933 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2934 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
2935 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002936 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002937 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2938 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2939 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2940 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02002941 *
2942 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
2943 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
2944 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02002945 *
2946 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
2947 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02002948 *
2949 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
2950 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
2951 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
2952 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
2953 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
2954 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
2955 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
2956 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
2957 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002958 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
2959 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
2960 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
2961 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
2962 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
2963 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
2964 * the function call.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002965 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002966struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002967 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2968 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2969 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002970 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002971 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002972#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2973 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2974 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002975 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002976#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002977 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002978 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002979 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2980 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002981 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002982 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002983 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002984 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002985 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2986 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2987 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2988 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002989
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002990 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2991 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2992
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002993 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002994 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002995 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2996 unsigned int changed_flags,
2997 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002998 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002999 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3000 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003001 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003002 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003003 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003004 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003005 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3006 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3007 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3008 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003009 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3010 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3011 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003012 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3013 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003014 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003015 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003016 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3017 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003018 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3019 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3020 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003021 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003022 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003023 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003024 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3025 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3026 const u8 *mac_addr);
3027 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3028 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003029 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3030 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01003031 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
3032 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003033 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003034 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003035 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3036 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3037 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3038 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303039#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3040 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3041 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3042 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3043 struct dentry *dir);
3044 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3045 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3046 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3047 struct dentry *dir);
3048#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003049 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003050 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003051 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3052 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3053 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3054 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003055 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3056 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3057 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003058 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3059 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3060 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3061 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003062 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3064 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003065 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003066 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003067 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003068 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3069 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3070 u64 tsf);
3071 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003072 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003073 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003075 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003076 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3077 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003078 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3079 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003080 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003081 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003082#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003083 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3084 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003085 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3086 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3087 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003088#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003089 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3090 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003091 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003092 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003093 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003094 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3095 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003096
3097 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003098 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003099 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003100 int duration,
3101 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003102 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003103 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3104 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3105 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303106 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303107 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3108 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003109 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02003110 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003111 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003112
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003113 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3114 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3115 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3116 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3117 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003118 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3119 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3120 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3121 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3122 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003123
3124 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3125 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3126 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3128 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3129 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3130 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3131 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03003132 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3133 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003134
3135 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3136 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003137
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003138 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3139 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3140
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003141 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3142 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3143 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3144 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3145 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3146 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3147 u32 changed);
3148 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3149 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3150 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3151 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3152 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3153 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003154 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3155 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3156 int n_vifs,
3157 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003158
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003159 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3160 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003161
3162#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3163 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3164 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3165 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3166#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003167 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3168 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3169 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003170 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3171 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3172 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003173
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003174 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3175 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3176
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003177 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3178 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003179 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003180 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3181 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003182
3183 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3184 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3185 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3186 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003187 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003188 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3189 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3190 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003191 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3193 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003194};
3195
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003196/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003197 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3198 *
3199 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3200 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3201 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3202 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3203 * @priv_data_len.
3204 *
3205 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3206 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3207 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3208 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3209 *
3210 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3211 */
3212struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3213 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3214 const char *requested_name);
3215
3216/**
3217 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003218 *
3219 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3220 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3221 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3222 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3223 * @priv_data_len.
3224 *
3225 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3226 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003227 *
3228 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003229 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003230static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003231struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003232 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3233{
3234 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3235}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003236
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003237/**
3238 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3239 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003240 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3241 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3242 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003243 *
3244 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003245 *
3246 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003247 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003248int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3249
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003250/**
3251 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3252 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3253 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3254 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3255 */
3256struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3257 int throughput;
3258 int blink_time;
3259};
3260
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003261/**
3262 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3263 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3264 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3265 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3266 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3267 */
3268enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3269 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3270 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3271 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3272};
3273
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003274#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003275char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3276char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3277char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3278char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3279char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3280 unsigned int flags,
3281 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3282 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003283#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003284/**
3285 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3286 *
3287 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3288 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3289 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3290 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3291 *
3292 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003293 *
3294 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003295 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003296static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3297{
3298#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3299 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3300#else
3301 return NULL;
3302#endif
3303}
3304
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003305/**
3306 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3307 *
3308 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3309 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3310 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3311 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3312 *
3313 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003314 *
3315 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003316 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003317static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3318{
3319#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3320 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3321#else
3322 return NULL;
3323#endif
3324}
3325
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003326/**
3327 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3328 *
3329 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3330 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3331 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3332 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3333 *
3334 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003335 *
3336 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003337 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003338static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3339{
3340#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3341 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3342#else
3343 return NULL;
3344#endif
3345}
3346
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003347/**
3348 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3349 *
3350 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3351 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3352 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3353 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3354 *
3355 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003356 *
3357 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003358 */
3359static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3360{
3361#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3362 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3363#else
3364 return NULL;
3365#endif
3366}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003367
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003368/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003369 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3370 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003371 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003372 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3373 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3374 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003375 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3376 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3377 *
3378 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003379 */
3380static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003381ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003382 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3383 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3384{
3385#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003386 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003387 blink_table_len);
3388#else
3389 return NULL;
3390#endif
3391}
3392
3393/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003394 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3395 *
3396 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3397 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3398 *
3399 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3400 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003401void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3402
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003403/**
3404 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3405 *
3406 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3407 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003408 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003409 *
3410 * @hw: the hardware to free
3411 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003412void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3413
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003414/**
3415 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3416 *
3417 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3418 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3419 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3420 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3421 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3422 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3423 *
3424 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3425 */
3426void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3427
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003428/**
3429 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3430 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3431 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3432 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3433 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3434 * @poll: poll function
3435 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003436 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003437 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003438 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003439void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3440 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3441 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3442 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003443
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003444/**
3445 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3446 *
3447 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003448 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3449 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3450 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3451 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003452 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003453 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003454 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3455 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003456 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3457 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003458 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003459 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003460 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003461 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3462 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003463 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003464void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003465
3466/**
3467 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3468 *
3469 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003470 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3471 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003472 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003473 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3474 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003475 *
3476 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3477 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003478 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003479void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003480
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003481/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003482 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3483 *
3484 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3485 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3486 *
3487 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003488 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3489 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003490 *
3491 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3492 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3493 */
3494static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3495 struct sk_buff *skb)
3496{
3497 local_bh_disable();
3498 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3499 local_bh_enable();
3500}
3501
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003502/**
3503 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3504 *
3505 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3506 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3507 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3508 *
3509 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3510 *
3511 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3512 * each other.
3513 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003514 * @sta: currently connected sta
3515 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003516 *
3517 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003518 */
3519int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3520
3521/**
3522 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3523 * (in process context)
3524 *
3525 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3526 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3527 * applies.
3528 *
3529 * @sta: currently connected sta
3530 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003531 *
3532 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003533 */
3534static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3535 bool start)
3536{
3537 int ret;
3538
3539 local_bh_disable();
3540 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3541 local_bh_enable();
3542
3543 return ret;
3544}
3545
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003546/*
3547 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3548 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3549 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003550#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003551
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003552/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003553 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003554 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003555 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3556 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003557 *
3558 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003559 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3560 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003561 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003562 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3563 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3564 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3565 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3566 *
3567 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3568 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3569 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3570 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3571 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3572 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3573 *
3574 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3575 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3576 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3577 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3578 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003579 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003580void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3581 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003582
3583/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003584 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3585 *
3586 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3587 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3588 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3589 *
3590 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3591 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3592 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3593 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3594 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3595 */
3596void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3597 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3598 struct sk_buff *skb,
3599 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3600 int max_rates);
3601
3602/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003603 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3604 *
3605 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3606 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3607 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3608 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003609 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3610 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003611 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003612 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3613 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003614 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003615 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3616 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003617 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003618void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003619 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003620
3621/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003622 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3623 *
3624 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3625 *
3626 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3627 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3628 * for a single hardware.
3629 *
3630 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3631 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3632 */
3633static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3634 struct sk_buff *skb)
3635{
3636 local_bh_disable();
3637 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3638 local_bh_enable();
3639}
3640
3641/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003642 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003643 *
3644 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3645 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3646 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003647 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3648 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003649 *
3650 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3651 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003652 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003653void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003654 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003655
3656/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003657 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3658 *
3659 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3660 * connected STA.
3661 *
3662 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3663 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3664 */
3665void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3666
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003667#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3668
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003669/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003670 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3671 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3672 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003673 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3674 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3675 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003676 */
3677struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3678 u16 tim_offset;
3679 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003680
3681 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003682};
3683
3684/**
3685 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3686 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3687 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3688 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3689 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3690 *
3691 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3692 * obtain the beacon template.
3693 *
3694 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3695 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003696 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3697 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003698 *
3699 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3700 *
3701 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3702 */
3703struct sk_buff *
3704ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3705 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3706 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3707
3708/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003709 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3710 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003711 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003712 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3713 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3714 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3715 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3716 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3717 *
3718 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003719 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003720 *
3721 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3722 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003723 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3724 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003725 *
3726 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003727 *
3728 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003729 */
3730struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3732 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3733
3734/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003735 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3736 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003737 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003738 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003739 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003740 *
3741 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003742 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003743static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3744 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3745{
3746 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3747}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003748
3749/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003750 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3751 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3752 *
3753 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3754 * This function is called implicitly when
3755 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3756 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3757 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3758 *
3759 * Return: new csa counter value
3760 */
3761u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3762
3763/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003764 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3765 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3766 *
3767 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003768 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003769 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3770 */
3771void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3772
3773/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003774 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003775 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3776 *
3777 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3778 */
3779bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3780
3781
3782/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003783 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3784 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3785 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3786 *
3787 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3788 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3789 *
3790 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003791 *
3792 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003793 */
3794struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3796
3797/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003798 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3799 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3800 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3801 *
3802 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3803 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3804 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3805 *
3806 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3807 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003808 *
3809 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003810 */
3811struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3812 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3813
3814/**
3815 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3816 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3817 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3818 *
3819 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3820 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3821 * BSSID and address is used.
3822 *
3823 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3824 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003825 *
3826 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003827 */
3828struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3829 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3830
3831/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003832 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3833 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003834 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003835 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3836 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003837 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003838 *
3839 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3840 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003841 *
3842 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003843 */
3844struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003845 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003846 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003847 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003848
3849/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003850 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3851 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003852 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003853 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3854 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003855 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003856 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3857 *
3858 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3859 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3860 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3861 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3862 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003863void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003864 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003865 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003866 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3867
3868/**
3869 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3870 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003871 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003872 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003873 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003874 *
3875 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3876 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3877 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003878 *
3879 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003880 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003881__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003883 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003884
3885/**
3886 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3887 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003888 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003889 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3890 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003891 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003892 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3893 *
3894 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3895 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3896 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3897 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3898 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003899void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3900 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003901 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003902 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003903 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3904
3905/**
3906 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3907 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003908 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003909 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003910 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003911 *
3912 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3913 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3914 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003915 *
3916 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003917 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003918__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3919 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003920 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003921 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003922
3923/**
3924 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3925 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003926 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003927 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003928 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003929 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003930 *
3931 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3932 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003933 *
3934 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003935 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003936__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3937 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003938 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003939 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003940 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003941
3942/**
3943 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3944 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003945 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003946 *
3947 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3948 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3949 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3950 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003951 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3952 *
3953 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3954 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003955 *
3956 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3957 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3958 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3959 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3960 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3961 * use common code for all beacons.
3962 */
3963struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003964ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003965
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003966/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003967 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3968 *
3969 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3970 *
3971 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3972 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3973 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3974 */
3975void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3976 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3977
3978/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003979 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003980 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003981 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3982 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003983 *
3984 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003985 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3986 * with this P1K
3987 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003988 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003989static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3990 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3991{
3992 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3993 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3994 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3995
3996 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3997}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003998
3999/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004000 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4001 *
4002 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4003 * and transmitter address.
4004 *
4005 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4006 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4007 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4008 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4009 */
4010void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4011 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4012
4013/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004014 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4015 *
4016 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4017 * in the packet.
4018 *
4019 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4020 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4021 * encrypted with this key
4022 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4023 */
4024void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4025 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004026
4027/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004028 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4029 *
4030 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4031 * previously installed master key.
4032 *
4033 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4034 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4035 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4036 */
4037void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4038 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4039
4040/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004041 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
4042 *
4043 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
4044 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4045 * reverse order than in packet)
4046 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4047 * reverse order than in packet)
4048 */
4049struct ieee80211_key_seq {
4050 union {
4051 struct {
4052 u32 iv32;
4053 u16 iv16;
4054 } tkip;
4055 struct {
4056 u8 pn[6];
4057 } ccmp;
4058 struct {
4059 u8 pn[6];
4060 } aes_cmac;
4061 };
4062};
4063
4064/**
4065 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4066 *
4067 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4068 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4069 *
4070 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4071 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4072 * offloaded to the device.
4073 *
4074 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4075 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4076 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4077 */
4078void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4079 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4080
4081/**
4082 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4083 *
4084 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4085 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
4086 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4087 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4088 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4089 *
4090 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4091 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4092 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4093 *
4094 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4095 * can be done concurrently.
4096 */
4097void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4098 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4099
4100/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004101 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4102 *
4103 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4104 * @seq: new sequence data
4105 *
4106 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4107 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4108 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4109 * ARP requests.
4110 *
4111 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4112 * can be done concurrently.
4113 */
4114void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4115 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4116
4117/**
4118 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4119 *
4120 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4121 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
4122 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4123 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4124 * @seq: new sequence data
4125 *
4126 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4127 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4128 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4129 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4130 *
4131 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4132 * can be done concurrently.
4133 */
4134void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4135 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4136
4137/**
4138 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4139 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4140 *
4141 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4142 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4143 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4144 *
4145 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4146 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4147 */
4148void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4149
4150/**
4151 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4152 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4153 * @keyconf: new key data
4154 *
4155 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4156 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4157 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4158 *
4159 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4160 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4161 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4162 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4163 *
4164 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4165 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4166 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4167 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4168 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4169 * of the reconfiguration.
4170 *
4171 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4172 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4173 *
4174 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4175 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4176 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4177 * the key that's being replaced.
4178 */
4179struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4180ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4181 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4182
4183/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004184 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4185 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4186 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4187 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4188 * @gfp: allocation flags
4189 */
4190void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4191 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4192
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004193/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004194 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4195 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4196 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4197 *
4198 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4199 */
4200void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4201
4202/**
4203 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4204 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4205 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4206 *
4207 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4208 */
4209void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4210
4211/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004212 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4213 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4214 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4215 *
4216 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004217 *
4218 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004219 */
4220
4221int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4222
4223/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004224 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4225 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4226 *
4227 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4228 */
4229void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4230
4231/**
4232 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4233 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4234 *
4235 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4236 */
4237void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4238
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004239/**
4240 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4241 *
4242 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4243 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004244 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4245 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004246 *
4247 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004248 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004249 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004250void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004251
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004252/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004253 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4254 *
4255 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4256 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4257 *
4258 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4259 */
4260void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4261
4262/**
4263 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4264 *
4265 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4266 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4267 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4268 * while associating, for instance.
4269 *
4270 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4271 */
4272void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4273
4274/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004275 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4276 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4277 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4278 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4279 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4280 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4281 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4282 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4283 */
4284enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4285 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4286 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
4287};
4288
4289/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004290 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004291 *
4292 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4293 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004294 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4295 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4296 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004297 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004298 *
4299 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004300 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004301 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004302 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4303 */
4304void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004305 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004306 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004308 void *data);
4309
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004310/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004311 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4312 *
4313 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4314 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4315 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4316 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004317 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004318 *
4319 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004320 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004321 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4322 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4323 */
4324void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004325 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004326 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4327 u8 *mac,
4328 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4329 void *data);
4330
4331/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004332 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4333 *
4334 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4335 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4336 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4337 *
4338 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4339 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4340 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4341 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4342 */
4343void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4344 u32 iter_flags,
4345 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4346 u8 *mac,
4347 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4348 void *data);
4349
4350/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004351 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4352 *
4353 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4354 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4355 * function for them.
4356 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4357 *
4358 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4359 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4360 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4361 */
4362void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4363 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4364 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4365 void *data);
4366/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004367 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4368 *
4369 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4370 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4371 *
4372 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4373 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4374 */
4375void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4376
4377/**
4378 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4379 *
4380 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4381 * workqueue.
4382 *
4383 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4384 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4385 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4386 */
4387void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4388 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4389 unsigned long delay);
4390
4391/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004392 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004393 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004394 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304395 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004396 *
4397 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004398 *
4399 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4400 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4401 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4402 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304403int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4404 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004405
4406/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004407 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004408 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004409 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4410 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4411 *
4412 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004413 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4414 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004415 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004416void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004417 u16 tid);
4418
4419/**
4420 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004421 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004422 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004423 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004424 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004425 *
4426 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4427 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4428 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4429 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004430int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004431
4432/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004433 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004434 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004435 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4436 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4437 *
4438 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004439 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4440 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004441 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004442void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004443 u16 tid);
4444
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004445/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004446 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4447 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004448 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004449 * @addr: station's address
4450 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004451 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4452 *
4453 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004454 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4455 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004456struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004457 const u8 *addr);
4458
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004459/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004460 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004461 *
4462 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004463 * @addr: remote station's address
4464 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004465 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004466 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4467 *
4468 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004469 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4470 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004471 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4472 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4473 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4474 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4475 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4476 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4477 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004478 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004479 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004480 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004481struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4482 const u8 *addr,
4483 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004484
4485/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004486 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4487 * @hw: the hardware
4488 * @pubsta: the station
4489 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4490 *
4491 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4492 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4493 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4494 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4495 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4496 *
4497 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4498 * manner.
4499 *
4500 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4501 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4502 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4503 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4504 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4505 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4506 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4507 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4508 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4509 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4510 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4511 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4512 * woke up while blocked or not.
4513 */
4514void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4515 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4516
4517/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004518 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4519 * @pubsta: the station
4520 *
4521 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4522 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4523 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4524 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4525 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004526 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4527 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4528 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4529 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4530 *
4531 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4532 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4533 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4534 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004535 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004536void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004537
4538/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004539 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4540 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4541 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4542 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4543 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4544 *
4545 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4546 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4547 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4548 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4549 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4550 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004551 *
4552 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4553 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4554 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004555 */
4556void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4557 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4558 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4559 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4560 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4561 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4562 void *data),
4563 void *iter_data);
4564
4565/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004566 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4567 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4568 * @iter: iterator function
4569 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4570 *
4571 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4572 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4573 * places while calling into the driver.
4574 *
4575 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4576 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4577 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004578 *
4579 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4580 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4581 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4582 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004583 */
4584void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4585 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4586 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4587 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4588 void *data),
4589 void *iter_data);
4590
4591/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004592 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4593 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4594 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4595 *
4596 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4597 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4598 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4599 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4600 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004601 * %NULL.
4602 *
4603 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004604 */
4605struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4606 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4607
4608/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004609 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4610 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004611 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004612 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004613 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004614 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004615 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4616 */
4617void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004618
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004619/**
4620 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4621 *
4622 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4623 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004624 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004625 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4626 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004627 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4628 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004629 *
4630 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4631 * without connection recovery attempts.
4632 */
4633void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4634
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004635/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004636 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4637 *
4638 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4639 *
4640 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4641 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4642 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4643 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4644 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4645 *
4646 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4647 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4648 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4649 * disconnect normally later.
4650 *
4651 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4652 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4653 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4654 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4655 */
4656void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4657
4658/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004659 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4660 * rssi threshold triggered
4661 *
4662 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4663 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4664 * @gfp: context flags
4665 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004666 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004667 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4668 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4669 */
4670void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4671 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4672 gfp_t gfp);
4673
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004674/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004675 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4676 *
4677 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4678 */
4679void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4680
4681/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004682 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4683 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4684 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4685 *
4686 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4687 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4688 */
4689void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4690
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004691/**
4692 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4693 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004694 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004695 *
4696 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4697 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4698 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4699 */
4700void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4701 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4702
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004703/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004704 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4705 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4706 */
4707void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4708
4709/**
4710 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4711 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4712 */
4713void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4714
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004715/**
4716 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4717 *
4718 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4719 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4720 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4721 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4722 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4723 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4724 *
4725 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4726 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4727 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4728 */
4729void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4730 const u8 *addr);
4731
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004732/**
4733 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4734 *
4735 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4736 * buffer.
4737 *
4738 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4739 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4740 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4741 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4742 */
4743void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4744
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02004745/**
4746 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
4747 *
4748 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4749 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4750 * reordering.
4751 *
4752 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4753 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
4754 *
4755 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4756 * @addr: station mac address
4757 * @tid: the rx tid
4758 */
4759void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4760 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4761
4762/**
4763 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
4764 *
4765 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4766 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4767 * reordering.
4768 *
4769 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4770 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
4771 *
4772 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4773 * @addr: station mac address
4774 * @tid: the rx tid
4775 */
4776void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4777 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4778
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004779/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004780
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004781/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004782 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004783 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004784 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4785 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4786 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004787 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4788 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004789 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4790 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4791 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4792 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4793 * RTS threshold
4794 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4795 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004796 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004797 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4798 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004799 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004800 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004801 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004802 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004803struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4804 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4805 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4806 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4807 struct sk_buff *skb;
4808 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4809 bool rts, short_preamble;
4810 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004811 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004812 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004813 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004814};
4815
4816struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004817 const char *name;
4818 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004819 void (*free)(void *priv);
4820
4821 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4822 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004823 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004824 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304825 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004826 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004827 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4828 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004829 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4830 void *priv_sta);
4831
4832 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4833 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4834 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004835 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4836 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004837
4838 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4839 struct dentry *dir);
4840 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02004841
4842 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004843};
4844
4845static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4846 enum ieee80211_band band,
4847 int index)
4848{
4849 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4850}
4851
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004852/**
4853 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4854 *
4855 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4856 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4857 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4858 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4859 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4860 * not null.
4861 *
4862 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4863 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4864 *
4865 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4866 * that this may be null.
4867 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4868 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4869 */
4870bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4871 void *priv_sta,
4872 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4873
4874
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004875static inline s8
4876rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4877 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4878{
4879 int i;
4880
4881 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4882 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4883 return i;
4884
4885 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004886 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004887
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004888 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004889 return 0;
4890}
4891
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004892static inline
4893bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4894 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4895{
4896 unsigned int i;
4897
4898 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4899 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4900 return true;
4901 return false;
4902}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004903
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004904/**
4905 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4906 *
4907 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4908 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4909 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4910 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4911 *
4912 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4913 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4914 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4915 */
4916int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4917 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4918 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4919
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01004920int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4921void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004922
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004923static inline bool
4924conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4925{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004926 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004927}
4928
4929static inline bool
4930conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4931{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004932 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4933 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004934}
4935
4936static inline bool
4937conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4938{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004939 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4940 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004941}
4942
4943static inline bool
4944conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4945{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004946 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004947}
4948
4949static inline bool
4950conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4951{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02004952 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
4953 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
4954 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004955}
4956
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004957static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4958ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4959{
4960 if (p2p) {
4961 switch (type) {
4962 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4963 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4964 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4965 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4966 default:
4967 break;
4968 }
4969 }
4970 return type;
4971}
4972
4973static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4974ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4975{
4976 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4977}
4978
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07004979void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4980 int rssi_min_thold,
4981 int rssi_max_thold);
4982
4983void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03004984
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004985/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004986 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004987 *
4988 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4989 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004990 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4991 *
4992 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4993 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004994 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07004995int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4996
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01004997/**
4998 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4999 * @vif: virtual interface
5000 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5001 * @gfp: allocation flags
5002 *
5003 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5004 */
5005void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5006 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5007 gfp_t gfp);
5008
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005009/**
5010 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5011 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5012 * @vif: virtual interface
5013 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5014 * @band: the band to transmit on
5015 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5016 *
5017 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5018 */
5019bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5020 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5021 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5022
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005023/**
5024 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5025 *
5026 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5027 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5028 *
5029 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5030 *
5031 * private:
5032 *
5033 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5034 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5035 */
5036struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5037 u32 next_tsf;
5038 bool has_next_tsf;
5039
5040 u8 absent;
5041
5042 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5043 struct {
5044 u32 start;
5045 u32 duration;
5046 u32 interval;
5047 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5048};
5049
5050/**
5051 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5052 *
5053 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5054 * @data: NoA tracking data
5055 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5056 *
5057 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5058 */
5059int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5060 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5061
5062/**
5063 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5064 *
5065 * @data: NoA tracking data
5066 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5067 */
5068void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5069
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005070/**
5071 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5072 * @vif: virtual interface
5073 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5074 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5075 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5076 * @gfp: allocation flags
5077 *
5078 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5079 */
5080void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5081 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5082 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005083
5084/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005085 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5086 *
5087 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5088 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5089 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5090 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5091 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5092 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5093 *
5094 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5095 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5096 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5097 *
5098 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5099 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5100 *
5101 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5102 */
5103int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5104
5105/**
5106 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5107 *
5108 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5109 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5110 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5111 *
5112 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5113 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5114 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5115 *
5116 * @sta: the station
5117 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5118 */
5119void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5120
5121/**
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005122 * ieee80211_ie_split - split an IE buffer according to ordering
5123 *
5124 * @ies: the IE buffer
5125 * @ielen: the length of the IE buffer
5126 * @ids: an array with element IDs that are allowed before
5127 * the split
5128 * @n_ids: the size of the element ID array
5129 * @offset: offset where to start splitting in the buffer
5130 *
5131 * This function splits an IE buffer by updating the @offset
5132 * variable to point to the location where the buffer should be
5133 * split.
5134 *
5135 * It assumes that the given IE buffer is well-formed, this
5136 * has to be guaranteed by the caller!
5137 *
5138 * It also assumes that the IEs in the buffer are ordered
5139 * correctly, if not the result of using this function will not
5140 * be ordered correctly either, i.e. it does no reordering.
5141 *
5142 * The function returns the offset where the next part of the
5143 * buffer starts, which may be @ielen if the entire (remainder)
5144 * of the buffer should be used.
5145 */
5146size_t ieee80211_ie_split(const u8 *ies, size_t ielen,
5147 const u8 *ids, int n_ids, size_t offset);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005148#endif /* MAC80211_H */